Jeep 2014 Grand Cherokee Srt Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Jeep Jeep-2014-Jeep-Grand-Cherokee-Srt-Owners-Manual-817369 jeep-2014-jeep-grand-cherokee-srt-owners-manual-817369 jeep pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 613 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

1287146cv1 14WK742-126-AA Grand Cherokee SRT8 Chrysler 1" gutter 12/06/2012 10:25:16
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Grand Cherokee SRT8
14WK742-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014 Grand Cherokee
SRT8
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Grand Cherokee SRT8
14WK742-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014 Grand Cherokee
SRT8
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Grand Cherokee SRT8
14WK742-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014 Grand Cherokee
SRT8
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Grand Cherokee SRT8
14WK742-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014 Grand Cherokee
SRT8
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Grand Cherokee SRT8
14WK742-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014 Grand Cherokee
SRT8
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Grand Cherokee SRT8
14WK742-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014 Grand Cherokee
SRT8
COVER INCOVER IN
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drink-
ing, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea-
tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obliga-
tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drink-
ing, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea-
tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obliga-
tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This
connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only
fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure
a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This
connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only
fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure
a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1INTRODUCTION .............................................................3
2THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ............................11
3UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ............................117
4UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ..................................283
5STARTING AND OPERATING .................................................377
6WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ..............................................475
7MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ...............................................503
8MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES .................................................563
9IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ........................................581
10 INDEX ....................................................................591
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵INTRODUCTION ........................4
䡵ROLLOVER WARNING ...................5
䡵HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............6
䡵WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............8
䡵VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........8
䡵VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....9
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a
four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmis-
sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
4 INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro-
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
Rollover Warning Label
6 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read
this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Infor-
mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VIN Location
8 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 9
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............14
▫Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) ..............14
▫KeyFob.............................15
▫Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........16
䡵SENTRY KEY® .........................17
▫Replacement Keys .....................18
▫Customer Key Programming ..............19
▫General Information ....................19
䡵
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .20
▫Rearming The System ...................20
▫To Arm The System ....................20
▫To Disarm The System ...................21
▫Tamper Alert .........................22
䡵ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED ......22
䡵REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........23
▫To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........24
▫To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............25
▫Using The Panic Alarm ..................26
▫Programming Additional Transmitters .......26
▫Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........26
2
▫General Information ....................28
䡵
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .28
▫How To Use Remote Start ................29
䡵DOOR LOCKS .........................32
▫Power Door Locks .....................34
▫Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..........................35
䡵KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ .................36
䡵WINDOWS ...........................41
▫Power Windows .......................41
▫Wind Buffeting .......................46
䡵LIFTGATE ............................46
▫Power Liftgate — If Equipped .............47
䡵OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS ................50
▫Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................54
▫Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions .....55
▫Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....59
▫Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .59
▫Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ......60
▫Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped ............................61
▫Energy Management Feature ..............62
▫Seat Belt Pretensioners ..................62
▫Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .63
▫Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) ..........................67
▫Seat Belt Lock Out......................68
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ...........68
▫Seat Belt Extender .....................68
▫Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags ............................69
▫Advanced Front Air Bag Features ...........71
▫Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls ....76
▫Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............84
▫Child Restraints .......................85
䡵SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS ..................110
䡵SAFETY TIPS .........................111
▫Transporting Passengers .................111
▫Exhaust Gas .........................111
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................112
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................114
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙in ⬙Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙for further informa-
tion).
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet park-
ing.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unau-
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, an Ignition Node Mod-
ule, Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a RF receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only
Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used
to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow
the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine
off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start
the engine.
NOTE: A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Key Fob to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after
two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
•For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When
the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door
locks, and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm provides both audio and visual signals, the
horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three min-
utes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door,
passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
for an additional 15 minutes.
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite different.
Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
one should go off in the future, you will need to know
which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙for further information).
•For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
•
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the
key is physically removed from the ignition.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
•Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
•Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙for
further information).
•Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
•Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
•Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (refer to
⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙in ⬙Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle⬙for further information).
•Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
NOTE:
•The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
•The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door the alarm will sound.
•When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped).
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
NOTE:
•The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
•The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the power liftgate, remote start your vehicle (if
equipped), or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up
to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob
with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Fob
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
•The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans-
mitter may reduce this range.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
•You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
•Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please
dispose of them according to respect for environment
and local laws.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You
can dispose of them either in the correct containers as
specified by law or by taking them to a Dealership,
which will deal with their disposal.
•Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans-
mitter may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•Shift lever in PARK
•Doors closed
•Hood closed
•HAZARD switch off
•BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•Battery at an acceptable charge level
•RKE PANIC button not pressed
•Fuel meets minimum requirement
•System not disabled from previous remote start event
•Vehicle security alarm not active
WARNING!
•Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
•Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
•Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
•Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Ajar
•Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
•Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
•Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash, vehicle
doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine
will run for 15 minutes.
NOTE:
•If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
•If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute
cycle, cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start
is activated. These features will stay on through the
duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is
turned to the ON/RUN position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect® System. For more infor-
mation on Remote Start Comfort System operation refer to
”Customer Programmable Features” in “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
Manual Door Lock Knob
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause se-
vere personal injuries or death.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If the door lock switch is pressed down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key
Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
If the door lock switch is pressed while the ignition is in
ACC or ON/RUN and the driver’s door is open, the
doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or through the Uconnect® Settings in
your radio.
Power Door Lock Switch
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
stopped and in PARK. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings”⬘in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
•If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked. NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
electronic liftgate release for a power open on vehicles
equipped with Power Liftgate. Press the electronic lift-
gate release and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate will
open with the electronic liftgate release and no RKE
Transmitter is required.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in Uconnect® Settings, all doors will unlock when you
push the electronic liftgate release. If ⬙Unlock Driver
Door 1st press⬙is programmed in Uconnect®, the liftgate
will unlock when you press the electronic liftgate release.
For further information, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release 2 — Lock Button Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: The key must be within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle
being used to lock the vehicle.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
•The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
•Closeness to mobile devices can have an effect on the
passive entry system.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door and rear doors which operate the front
passenger and rear passenger door windows. The win-
dow controls will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
The power window switches remain active for up to ten
minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Push the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” move-
ment, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To open the window part way, push to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
Auto Down Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road condi-
tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Auto Up Window Switches
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
disable the window controls on the rear doors, push the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
push the Window Lockout button again.
Window Lockout Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the
electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect® Settings, all doors will unlock when you push
the electronic liftgate release. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st
press⬙is programmed in Uconnect® Settings, the liftgate
will unlock when you press the electronic liftgate release.
For further information, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button
located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pressing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go™” located in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle”) or by pressing
the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. Press the LIFTGATE button on the
RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open the
power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pressing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release 2 — Lock Button Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the left side of
the steering wheel on the instrument panel, or closed by
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim
panel, near the liftgate opening. Pressing the LIFTGATE
button located on left rear trim panel once will close the
liftgate only, this button cannot be used to open the
liftgate.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect® settings)
and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further infor-
mation, refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings⬙in ⬙Understanding
Your Instrument Panel⬙.
NOTE:
•In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
•If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
•The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate switches.
•If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
•The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the
liftgate opening, to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
open, press the Liftgate button on the Key Fob twice to
fully open the liftgate, and then press it twice to close.
•If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
•If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will dis-
engage to allow manual operation.
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
•If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
detection of an obstruction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
•If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
•
Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
•Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint)
•Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
•Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
•Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
•An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
•Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and second
row center) include Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position
by extending the belt all the way out and then adjust-
ing the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat
or secure a large item in a seat — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
•Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
•Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
•Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is de-
signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
•Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest
you.
•A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
Latch Plate To Buckle
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
WARNING!
•A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdo-
men. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
•A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-
ately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assem-
blies must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Removing Slack From Belt
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that fits you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
button, verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched by
pulling downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it
is locked into position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the
shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re-
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR ALR ALR
•N/A — Not Applicable
•ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly re-
strained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
•The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
•Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-
pants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver ’s and
front passenger’s seat before driving. You can recognize
when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the
fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step
three of the resetting procedure).
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
Review Table Below AHR In Reset Position
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
•For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®)
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert®.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belt Lock Out
The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that
will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless
the rear seat upper latch is engaged.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase
the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat
belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug
and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the extender when not needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passen-
ger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS
AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. In addition,
the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Knee Air Bag
mounted in the instrument panel below the steering col-
umn and a Knee Bolster below the glove compartment.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster
2 — Knee Bolster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags, are located above the side windows and their
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
the outboard side of the front seats.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering
column and a Knee Bolster mounted below the glove
compartment.
NOTE:
•Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•Air Bag Warning Light
•Steering Wheel and Column
•Instrument Panel
•Knee Impact Bolsters
•Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
•Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
•Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
•Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
•Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
•Front and Side Impact Sensors
•Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING!
•No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
•Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll-
over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy down-
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
NOTE:
•Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
•Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the Supplemental SAB and SABIC air
bags during impacts that require side air bag occupant
protection.
WARNING!
•Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
•Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
•Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially chil-
dren, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu-
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im-
proved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as
required, depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection by
supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions
depending on several factors, including the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator
Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on
the right side of the instrument panel. When the ORC
detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags,
it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic
gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags.
Different air bag inflation rates are possible, based on
several factors, including the collision type and severity.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are de-
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20
milliseconds.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one-
quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
SABIC air bags, and driver/passenger knee air bags may
deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•Cut off fuel to the engine.
•Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON/RUN to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
•As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
•The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
cycled to the ON/RUN.
•The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the proper air bag fuses.
See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:
•http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and
Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing
child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be used
rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach
the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
•Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
•Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
•After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
•When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit peri-
odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Child Restraint LATCH Positions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?
No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes, center position
only.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located on
the back of the seat. To access the top tether
strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the
carpeted floor panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Second Row 60/40
Do not install a child restraint in the center position using
the LATCH system. Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Vehicles With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
1.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.”
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
ALR / Anchor Locations
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes, center position
only.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the car seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in
any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon-
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
2.
To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear
seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the
seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph
(80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil is a high performance synthetic lubricant,
the transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the
factory is high-quality and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid,
and lubricant changes should be consistent with antici-
pated climate and conditions under which vehicle opera-
tions will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
•Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
WARNING! (Continued)
•If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
•Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-
ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
•Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
•If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵MIRRORS ............................125
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .125
▫Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .125
▫Outside Mirrors ......................132
▫Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ..........132
▫Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If
Equipped ...........................132
▫Power Mirrors .......................133
▫Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped ...........................134
▫Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........134
▫Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped ...............135
▫Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..............135
▫Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
If Equipped .........................136
䡵BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED .........................136
▫Rear Cross Path ......................142
▫Modes Of Operation ...................143
▫General Information....................145
3
䡵SEATS ..............................145
▫Power Seats — If Equipped ..............146
▫Passenger’s Power Seat .................148
▫Power Lumbar — If Equipped ............149
▫Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment .........................150
▫Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline .................151
▫Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped..........................152
▫Heated Seats — If Equipped ..............152
▫Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......156
▫Head Restraints ......................157
▫60/40 Split Rear Seat ..................161
▫Reclining Rear Seat ....................163
䡵DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .163
▫Programming The Memory Feature .........165
▫Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory .............165
▫Memory Position Recall .................166
▫Easy Entry/Exit Seat ...................167
䡵TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........168
䡵LIGHTS .............................169
▫Headlight Switch .....................169
▫Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......171
▫Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . .171
▫Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ......172
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....173
▫Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID
Headlights Only ......................173
▫Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped ...............173
▫Headlight Delay ......................174
▫Parking Lights And Panel Lights...........174
▫Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............175
▫Interior Lights ........................175
▫Lights-On Reminder ...................176
▫Battery Saver.........................177
▫Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .177
▫Courtesy Lights .......................178
▫Ambient Light — If Equipped ............179
▫Multifunction Lever ....................179
▫Turn Signals .........................180
▫Lane Change Assist ...................180
▫Flash-To-Pass ........................180
▫High/Low Beam Switch.................180
䡵WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......181
▫Windshield Wiper Operation .............181
▫Intermittent Wiper System ...............182
▫Windshield Washer Operation.............183
▫Mist ...............................183
▫Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........184
䡵TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .186
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
䡵POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED ...............187
䡵HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................188
䡵ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................189
▫To Activate ..........................190
▫To Set A Desired Speed .................191
▫To Deactivate ........................191
▫To Resume Speed .....................191
▫To Vary The Speed Setting ...............192
▫To Accelerate For Passing ................193
䡵ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................194
▫Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .196
▫Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .197
▫To Activate/Deactivate..................198
▫To Set A Desired ACC Speed .............199
▫To Cancel ...........................200
▫ToTurnOff..........................200
▫To Resume ..........................200
▫To Vary The Speed Setting ...............201
▫Setting The Following Distance In ACC ......204
▫Overtake Aid ........................208
▫ACC Operation At Stop .................208
▫Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu .......209
▫Display Warnings And Maintenance ........210
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫Precautions While Driving With ACC .......213
▫General Information ...................217
▫Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode ........................217
䡵PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................221
▫ParkSense® Sensors ....................221
▫ParkSense® Warning Display .............222
▫ParkSense® Display ....................222
▫Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® ........226
▫Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System .............................226
▫Cleaning The ParkSense® System ..........227
▫ParkSense® System Usage Precautions.......227
䡵PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .................229
▫ParkSense® Sensors ....................230
▫ParkSense® Warning Display .............230
▫ParkSense® Display ....................231
▫Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® ........235
▫Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .236
▫Cleaning The ParkSense® System ..........237
▫ParkSense® System Usage Precautions.......237
䡵PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED .........................239
䡵OVERHEAD CONSOLE ..................242
▫Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .242
▫Courtesy Lights .......................243
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫Sunglasses Bin Door ...................244
䡵GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .244
▫Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .246
▫Programming A Rolling Code .............246
▫Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........249
▫Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......250
▫Using HomeLink® ....................251
▫Security ............................251
▫Troubleshooting Tips ...................252
▫General Information....................253
䡵POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........254
▫Opening Sunroof — Express ..............255
▫Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........255
▫Closing Sunroof — Express...............255
▫Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........255
▫Pinch Protect Feature ...................256
▫Venting Sunroof — Express ..............256
▫Sunshade Operation....................256
▫Wind Buffeting .......................256
▫Sunroof Maintenance ...................257
▫Ignition Off Operation ..................257
䡵COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED .................257
▫Opening Sunroof — Express ..............258
▫Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........259
▫Closing Sunroof — Express...............259
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........259
▫Opening Power Shade — Express ..........259
▫Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode .....260
▫Closing Power Shade — Express ...........260
▫Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode ......260
▫Venting Sunroof — Express ..............260
▫Pinch Protect Feature ...................261
▫Wind Buffeting .......................261
▫Sunroof Maintenance ...................261
▫Ignition Off Operation ..................262
▫Sunroof Fully Closed ...................262
䡵ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........262
䡵POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED ........267
䡵CUPHOLDERS ........................268
䡵STORAGE ............................269
▫Glove Compartment ...................269
▫Door Storage.........................270
▫Console Features .....................271
䡵CARGO AREA FEATURES ................273
▫Rechargeable Flashlight .................273
▫Cargo Storage Bins ....................274
▫Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped .........................276
▫Rear Cargo Tie-Downs .................277
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
䡵REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............279
▫Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............279
▫Rear Window Defroster .................280
䡵ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED .....281
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-
abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
•Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
•Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through
the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only
operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is
active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement
manual” for further information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
•Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
•Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
Mobile features.
•Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
•Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
•The vehicle brand.
•The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to
determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1
operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you
or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to
remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1
operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
•If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
•
The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
•The Phone Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
•An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
•Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-
nated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to
send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the ORC system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond Chrysler Group LLC’s control may prevent or
stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but
are not limited to, the following factors:
•The ignition key has been removed from the ignition
and the delayed accessories mode is active.
•The ignition key is in OFF position.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
•The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
•The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
•Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed.
•Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
•Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
•Wireless network congestion.
•Weather.
•Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
NOTE:
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless and
GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal reception
is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
•Full forward position
•Full rearward position
•Normal position
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, press
the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to
the normal driving position.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled,
a potential extra button push is required to get the
mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not
electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot
area which can cause excessive drag.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped
The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
seat setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Re-
verse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi-
tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out
the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Rear Detection Zones
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-
proximately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
•The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
•The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown) Warning Light Location
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Stationary Objects Opposing Traffic
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP Detection Zones
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
•Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
•If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
SEATS
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Passenger’s Power Seat
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas-
senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
Power Lumbar Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with manual front driver
or passenger seats. The seats can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Adjustment Bar
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seat backs.
WARNING!
•Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
•Press the heated seat button
once to turn the
HIGH setting ON.
•Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LOW setting ON.
•Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW,
indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat
switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the
seats independently. The heated seat switches for each
heater are located on the rear of the center console.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after ap-
proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to
one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
WARNING!
•Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans
that draw the air from the passenger compartment and
blow air through fine perforations in the seat cover to
help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HIGH and LOW.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
•Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose
HIGH.
•Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
choose LOW.
•Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear-
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints
(AHR) will be split in two halves, with the front half
being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative
plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the
driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
•In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WARNING! (Continued)
•Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re-
straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust-
able. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head
restraints are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push down-
ward on the head restraint to lower it.
Rear Head Restraint
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head re-
straints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.
NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Rear Seat Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
NOTE:
•Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the left
outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
•Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the right
outboard seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interfer-
ence from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
WARNING!
•Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stabil-
ity for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
Rear Seat Folded
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt
and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of
desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the
same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
Rear Seat Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans-
mitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
•The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function.
•The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
Memory Seat Switch
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position
(Do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station pre-
sets).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release either of the
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
memory position has been set.
NOTE:
•Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
•To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings ”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙in this
section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
the SET (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
in the instrument cluster.
5. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pressing the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Driver One Memory Position Recall
•To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch , press MEMORY button number 1 on
the memory switch.
•To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
•To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, press MEMORY button number 2 on
the memory switch.
•To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a
recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s mirror and
the steering column stop moving. A delay of one second
will occur before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
•When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
when you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or
RUN position.
•The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left
and lift the hood.
Hood Release
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-
light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
Safety Latch Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
NOTE:
•Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore differ-
ent lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
•To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Headlight Switch
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
system is on. This feature is programmable through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automati-
cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in this
section for further information.
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the day-
time, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
to the lower nighttime intensity.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The automatic high beam system provides increased for-
ward lighting at night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
and automatically switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
•If the windshield or automatic high beam mirror is
replaced, the automatic high beam mirror must be
re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local
authorized dealer.
•Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, etc.) on the
windshield or camera lens will cause the system to
function improperly.
To Activate
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (bright intensity) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged.
The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
Automatic Headlight Leveling — HID Headlights
Only
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in
reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically swivels the headlight beam
pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in
the direction the vehicle is steering.
NOTE:
•Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on,
the headlights will initialize by performing a brief
sequence of rotations.
•The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when
the vehicle is moving forward.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
NOTE: The headlight delay time is programmable
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the RKE transmitter the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is
Fog Light Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
“Party” mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehi-
cle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
headlights are required during the day.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Dimmer Control
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
head console.
Front Map/Reading Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-
ity of the floor and center console area.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Ambient Light
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
on the end of the lever. For information on the rear wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward the
steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of
the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
Windshield Washer Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch
in the OFF position when not using the system.
Mist Control
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
•The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
•Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
•The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
•Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
•Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift
lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre-
programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
•Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element ON.
•Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
•Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL
2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL
3 — RESUME
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO
MPH/KM will appear indicating what speed was set. An
indicator CRUISE will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the SET +button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET +button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET +button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET -button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET -button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
•If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
•
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
•Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
quired while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
(Continued)
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•The ACC system:
•Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
•Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
•Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
•Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
•When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
•When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
•When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
•When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
•Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
•Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
8 — CANCEL
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis-
plays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
•When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
•When you apply the brakes.
•When the parking brake is set.
•When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
•When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
•When the brakes are overheated.
•When the driver door is open.
•When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC displays
“ACC Ready.”
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Adaptive Cruise Control Off
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET +button or the SET -button and release. The EVIC
will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
•The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
•The system will not be controlling the distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
•The brake pedal is applied.
•The CANCEL button is pressed.
•An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
•The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
•The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
•The vehicle parking brake is applied.
•Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
•Driver door is opened at low speeds.
•A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
•The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
•The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
is pressed.
•The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pressed.
•The ignition is turned OFF.
•You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The EVIC will display the last set speed.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
•ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressing the SET +button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET +button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET +button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pressing the SET -button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET -button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID.
NOTE:
•When you override and push the SET +button or
SET -buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current
speed of the vehicle.
•When you use the SET -button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
•The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after com-
ing to a full stop.
•The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance Setting
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pressed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi-
cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto-
matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
•The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
•The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
•The distance setting is changed.
•The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
When this occurs, you should immediately apply the
brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle ahead.
Brake Alert
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional accelera-
tion to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
hand side of the Target vehicles.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. Driver intervention will be
required at this moment.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
EVIC is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the EVIC:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
tive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
EVIC:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
•Distance Setting Change
•System Cancel
•Driver Override
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
•System Off
•ACC Proximity Warning
•ACC Unavailable Warning
•The EVIC will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC will display “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
tant to note the following maintenance items:
•Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
•Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
•If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
•
Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Do-
ing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
•If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
•Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per-
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil-
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded perfor-
mance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full function-
ality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”or “Cruise/FCW
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a
key cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, press the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel-
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON-
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol is set, you can increase speed by pressing the SET +
button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET +button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET +button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pressing the SET -button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET -button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC display.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
•The brake pedal is applied.
•The CANCEL button is pressed.
•The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
•The vehicle parking brake is applied.
•The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
•The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the
Drive position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
•The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pressed.
•The ignition is turned off.
•You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
•The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pressed.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this
shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above
the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear within
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sys-
tem. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
EVIC. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected ob-
stacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” for further information.
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC will display
the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
Park Assist Ready
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear
region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change
from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Arc None 4th Solid 3rd
Solid
2nd
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch.
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to dis-
able the system, the instrument cluster will dis-
play the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for ap-
proximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever/gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense®
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense®
switch is pressed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condi-
tion, the EVIC will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙or ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense® will not operate.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper-
ating properly.
•Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
•When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument clus-
ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
•When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC will
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
•ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
•Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
EVIC.
•ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An
open liftgate could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
•The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
•Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limi-
tations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning will
appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense® oper-
ating speed. The system will become active again if the
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi-
mately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sys-
tem. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the de-
tected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Settings” in Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
ParkSense® Display
The warning display will turn ON indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on
the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
Park Assist Ready
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear
region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the object, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change
from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
47-39 in
(120-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
None Single 1/2
Second Tone
(for rear only)
Slow
(for rear only)
Fast Continuous
Arcs None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if equipped.
If Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume settings
will not be accessible from the EVIC.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch.
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to dis-
able the system, the instrument cluster will dis-
play the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for ap-
proximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever/gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense®
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense®
switch is pressed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be ON.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS⬙,⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED⬙message for five seconds. When the shift lever
is moved to Reverse and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the EVIC will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,⬙PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙or ⬙PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙pop up message
for five seconds. After five seconds, a car graphic will be
displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙at either the front or rear
sensor location depending on where the fault is detected.
The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side
that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt
the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
SORS⬙,⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙,or⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙messages if an object is detected within the five
second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙message appears in the EVIC, see an autho-
rized dealer.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
system operating properly.
•Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
•When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
•When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
•Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
•ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
•Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia
radio display screen along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView®
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic
grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of ⬙REVERSE⬙unless the forward vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into ⬙PARK⬙or the ignition is switched to the OFF
position.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position. The active guide lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the center
of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/receiver.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
•To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®), power liftgate and power sunroof
switches may also be included, if equipped.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Overhead Console Front Map/Reading Lights
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches Courtesy Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
Sunglasses Bin Door
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
•Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
•If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
•To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
•To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3.
Without releasing the button
proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink®
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
•Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
(Continued)
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
•The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
•Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
•In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE:
•The power sunroof switch can remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the vehicles ignition is
cycled to the Off position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
•
This feature is programmable using the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView® sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The power shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
CommandView® Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
WARNING!
•Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
•In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Opening Power Shade — Express
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will open automatically
from any position. The shade will open and stop auto-
matically at the half-open position. Press the shade
switch rearward again and release it within one-half
second and the shade will open automatically to the
full-open position. This is called “Express Open”. During
Express Open operation, any movement of the shade
switch will stop the shade.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Power Shade — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
completely.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙button within one-half sec-
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE:
•The power sunroof switch can remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the vehicles ignition is
cycled to the Off position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
•
This feature is programmable using the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
•All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
•To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR®
knob and element must be used.
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel. Push inward
on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain
access to this power outlet.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched to “bat-
tery” powered all the time by switching the power outlet
right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.
Center Console Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter
Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•Do not touch with wet hands.
•Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
•If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
•Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
•After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electron-
ics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Play-
station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
Power Inverter
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•Do not touch with wet hands.
•Close the lid when not in use.
•If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
located in the center console.
Front Cupholders
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the fold-down center armrest.
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Rear Cupholders
Glove Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the
latch and lower the glove compartment door.
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
Opened Glove Compartment
Door Panel Storage
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Features
The center console contains both an upper and a lower
storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the lid.
Storage Compartment
Storage Compartment Latches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player
located in the center console.
Lower Storage Compartment Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player — If
Equipped
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Press And Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Cargo Storage Bins
There are four removable storage bins located in the rear
cargo area. There are two storage bins located on either
side of the cargo area.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer,
the passenger side cargo area will not be available.
Three-Press Switch
Rear Storage Bin
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Two additional storage bins are located under the load
floor. To access the lower storage bins, raise the load floor
and attach the tether hook (attached to the bottom of the
load floor) to the liftgate opening.
Tether Strap
Lower Storage Bins
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
Rear Cargo Cover
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING!
•To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
(Continued)
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
WARNING! (Continued)
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
•Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
•Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
sible.
•Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
•Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the mul-
tifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more
will activate the washer pump which will con-
tinue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continu-
ous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch
is released the pump will resume normal operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized
dealer can order and install MOPAR® crossbars built
specifically for this roof rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, located at
the upper edge of each crossbar, approximately eight turns
using the anti-theft wrench provided with the MOPAR®
crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
crossbar is in the desired position, retighten the with the
wrench to lock the crossbar into position.
NOTE:
•To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
in use, place the front and rear crossbars approxi-
mately 24 in (61 cm) apart. Optimal noise reduction
can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
forward or aft using increments of 1 in (2.5 cm).
•If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
improved satellite radio reception, avoid placing the
rear crossbar over the satellite radio antenna.
•The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
CAUTION!
•To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, do
not carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection between
the load and the roof surface.
•To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
ately.
•Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........286
䡵INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM .......287
䡵INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....288
䡵ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) .......................297
▫Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ...........................300
▫Engine Oil Change Indicator System ........301
▫Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages ...........................302
▫Battery Saver Mode/Battery Saver On
Message — If Equipped ................305
▫EVIC Amber Telltales ...................305
▫EVIC Red Telltales .....................306
▫EVIC Green Telltales ...................309
▫EVIC Selectable Menu Items ..............309
▫Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items ........316
䡵Uconnect® SETTINGS....................317
▫Hard-Keys ..........................318
▫Soft-Keys ...........................319
4
▫Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 5.0/8.4 Settings ...............319
▫SRT Performance Features ...............337
䡵Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ........341
䡵iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................341
䡵Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .................342
▫Getting Started .......................342
▫Dual Video Screen .....................344
▫Blu-ray™ Disc Player ...................345
▫Play Video Games .....................346
▫Play A DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio .....................347
▫Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System .............................349
▫Blu-ray™ Disc Player Remote Control —
If Equipped..........................350
▫Replacing The Remote Control Batteries......351
▫Headphones Operation .................352
▫Controls ............................353
▫Replacing The Headphone Batteries.........354
▫Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty .....................354
䡵STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................362
▫Radio Operation ......................363
▫CD Player ...........................363
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........363
䡵RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .364
▫General Information ...................364
䡵CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................365
▫General Overview .....................365
▫Climate Control Functions ...............371
▫Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......373
▫Operating Tips .......................374
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Lower Switch Bank 11 — Hood Release
2 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Hazard Switch 12 — Fuel Door Release
3 — Radio 8 — Storage Bin (SD Card, AUX, USB Media Hub) 13 — Headlight Switch
4 — Glove Compartment 9 — ESC Button 14 — Dimmer Control
5 — Climate Controls 10 — Ignition Switch
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
6. Selectable EVIC Information
This area of the cluster will display selectable informa-
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For
further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your owners
manual for more information.
7. Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn
signals when the turn signal lever is operated.
A tone will chime, and an EVIC message will
appear if either turn signal is left on for more
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
8. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
9. Selectable EVIC Information
This area of the cluster will display selectable informa-
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc. For
further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your owners
manual for more information.
10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Certain conditions, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced
if the light stays on through several of your typical
driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
11. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off imme-
diately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood
yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap para-
graph.
12. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
13. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle
where the fuel door is located. The pointer shows the
level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
14. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter-
mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
15. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display/Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If she/he cannot do
so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker
must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage
was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you
to make a record of the odometer reading before the
repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly
reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the
odometer must be reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter” of your owners manual for more information.
16. Selectable EVIC Menu
This area of the cluster will display the EVIC selectable
menu. For further information, refer to “Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” of your
owners manual for more information.
17. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” of your owners manual for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
18. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
20. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
to ON/RUN.
•Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
21. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:
•Digital Speedometer
•Vehicle Info
•Fuel Economy Info
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Location
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
•Trip A
•Trip B
•Radio Info
•Stored Messages
•Screen Setup
•SRT
•4WD Setup
•Driver Assistance
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
EVIC Buttons
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•UP Arrow Button
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
•DOWN Arrow Button
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B,
Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
•RIGHT Arrow Button
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
•BACK Arrow Button
Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the
main menu from an info screen or sub-menu
item.
•OK Button
The OK button may be used for the following:
Selection
Reset (hold)
Clearing (hold)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of eight sections:
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings and
white for on demand information.
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Informa-
tion — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the
position within the sub-menus is shown here.
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Shift Lever Status (PRNDS)
6. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)
7. Selectable Gauge 2
8. Selectable Gauge 1
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
•Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message
takes control of the main display area for five seconds and
then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of
this type are then stored (as long as the condition that
activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the
“Messages” main menu item. As long as there is a stored
message, an “i” will be displayed in the EVIC’s compass/
outside temp line. Examples of this message type are “Right
Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
•Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
•Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes-
sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this
message type is “Automatic High Beams On”.
Engine Oil Change Indicator System
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the message tem-
porarily, press and release the OK button. To reset the oil
change indicator system (after performing the scheduled
maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, press the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages
•Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
•Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Service Airbag System
•Traction Control Off
•Washer Fluid Low
•Oil Pressure Low
•Oil Change Due
•Fuel Low
•Service Antilock Brake System
•Service Electronic Throttle Control
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Service Power Steering
•Cruise Off
•Cruise Ready
•Cruise Set To XXX MPH
•Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
•Service Tire Pressure System
•Parking Brake Engaged
•Brake Fluid Low
•Service Electronic Braking System
•Engine Temperature Hot
•Battery Voltage Low
•Service Electronic Throttle Control
•Lights On
•Right Turn Signal Light Out
•Left Turn Signal Light Out
•Turn Signal On
•Vehicle Not in Park
•Key in Ignition
•Key in Ignition Lights On
•Remote Start Active Key to Run
•Remote Start Active Push Start Button
•Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
•Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
•Remote Start Aborted Door Open
•Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
•Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
•Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
•Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
•Service Airbag System
•Service Airbag Warning Light
•Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
•Door Open
•Doors Open
•Tailgate Open
•Gear Not Available
•Shift Not Allowed
•Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
•Paddle Shift Mode Unavailable Service Required
•Automatic Unavailable Use Paddle Shift Mode Service
Required
•Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
•Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
•Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
•Service Transmission
•Service Shifter
•Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
•Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
•Washer Fluid Low
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
Battery Saver Mode/Battery Saver On Message —
If Equipped
When the ⬙Battery Saver Mode⬙or “Battery Saver On⬙
message is displayed, the vehicle will turn off certain
electrical functions to reduce battery energy consump-
tion. This will occur during periods when the battery is
not being adequately charged. During this time, the
following features (if equipped) may be turned off or will
operate at a reduced power level: heated seats and heated
steering wheel, heated or cooled cup-holder, rear de-
froster and heated mirrors, heating and air conditioning,
power inverter, audio and telematics system.
This condition is temporary and recoverable, this is for
driver information only.
EVIC Amber Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
•Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
•Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-
shield washer fluid is low.
•Low Coolant Level Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle
coolant level is low.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
•Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the
light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
EVIC Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
•Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Oil Pressure Warning Light
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
four minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
•Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible.
•Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging
system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical
devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging
system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experi-
encing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SER-
VICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
•Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle
will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer
for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when
the engine is running, immediate service is required. You
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough
idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
•Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H,
the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
•Electric Power Steering Malfunction – If Equipped
This telltale is on when the Electric Power
Steering is not operating and needs service.
•Liftgate Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
may be ajar.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Green Telltales
•Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate green when the elec-
tronic speed control is SET. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
EVIC.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Speedometer Menu item is
highlighted in the EVIC. Push the OK button to
change the speedometer scale from mph
to km/h (or vice versa).
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
in the EVIC. Press and release the RIGHT
arrow button and Coolant Temp will be dis-
played. Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to scroll
through the information sub-menus and press the OK
button to select or reset the following resettable sub-
menus:
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Only
Oil Temp
Oil Pressure
Oil Life
Multimeter
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Engine Hours
Tire Pressure
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC.
•If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.
•If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
•If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
Trip A
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in
the EVIC (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or
Trip B). The Trip A information will display the
following:
•Distance
•Average Fuel Economy
•Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip B
From the Trip A menu press and release the
Left or Right arrow button until the Trip B icon
is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left or right
to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip B informa-
tion will display the following:
•Distance
•Average Fuel Economy
•Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted. Push and
Hold the OK button to reset feature.
•Range
•Average Fuel Economy
•Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Audio Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
SRT
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the perfor-
mance pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
The Performance Features include the following:
•0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
•Braking Distance
•1/8 Mile
•1/4 Mile
•Instantaneous G-Force
•Peak G-Force
•Launch Mode – If Equipped
To access, press and release either the UP or DOWN
arrow button until “SRT” appears in the EVIC, then press
and release the RIGHT arrow button to cycle through the
features. Press the OK button to select a feature.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Timers
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
10 seconds.
•The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will appear
when conditions are met for the event to begin.
•The screen will revert back to “Please come to a
complete stop, Not Ready”, if the vehicle fails to reach
60 mph (100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
•The time will continue to display until the OK button
is pressed or the vehicles is brought to a stop.
Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
depressed.
•This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
•Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
•The word “READY” will display when conditions are
met for the event to begin.
•The distance and speed measurements display while
the event is taking place.
•The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com-
plete stop.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
•The distance and speed measurements will continue to
display until the conditions are met for another event
to be recorded.
•Pressing the OK button will clear the current run and
prepare the cluster to record a new run.
1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 25 seconds.
•The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will display when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
•0.0s will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 mile
(1/4 mile) in less then 25 seconds.
•The time will continue to display until the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
Instantaneous G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
(lateral and longitudinal).
Peak G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
•When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
•Pressing and holding the OK button for five seconds
will clear the peak force values.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Launch Mode – If Equipped
This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight
line racing.
1. Bring vehicle to complete stop on a level track surface
with the engine running.
2. Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving.
3. Fully press the brake pedal.
4. Press and release the “LAUNCH” Button.
5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
NOTE:
If the cluster launch EVIC message indicates all
conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is pressed
to the floor quickly (within approximately 1/2 second) the
system will hold the engine speed to a preset speed (below
the engine rev limiter speed).
6. Release the brake pedal.
Pressing the launch control button when launch control is
active will deactivate launch control.
NOTE:
•Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum RPM and
waits for the driver to release the brake. Launch Mode
then uses engine throttle only to achieve controlled
wheelslip for maximum acceleration through first
gear.
•Launch Mode can be initiated in any of the Select Trac
Modes.
•Launch Mode is not available until the 500 mile
break-in has been achieved.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Push and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus
and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what informa-
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
location that information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Current Gear
•On
•Off
Upper Left
•None
•Gear Display
•Compass
•Outside Temp (default setting)
•Time
•Range To Empty (RTE)
•Fuel Economy Average
•Fuel Economy Current
•Trip A
•Trip B
Upper Right
•None
•Compass (default setting)
•Outside Temp
•Time
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Range To Empty (RTE)
•Fuel Economy Average
•Fuel Economy Current
•Trip A
•Trip B
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
•Cancel
•Okay
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and
hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
that allows you to access and change the customer
programmable features.
Uconnect® 5.0 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys are located below the Uconnect® system in
the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Back hard-keys located below the system.
Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off the Uconnect®
screen. Press the Screen Off hard-key a second time to
turn the screen on.
Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect® system.
Uconnect® 8.4 Soft-Keys And Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect® Soft-Keys
2 — Uconnect® Hard-Keys
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® display.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 5.0/8.4 Settings
Uconnect® 5.0 — Press the SETTINGS hard-key to dis-
play the menu setting screen. Uconnect® 8.4 — Touch the
“Apps” soft-key, then touch the “Settings” soft-key to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable
features that may be equipped such as Display, Clock,
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SiriusXM Setup.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, touch the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode, touch and
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected. Once the setting is complete, either touch the back
arrow soft-key or the Back hard-key to return to the
previous menu or touch the “X” soft-key to close out of
the settings screen. Touching the Up or Down Arrow
soft-keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” soft-key the following set-
tings will be available:
•Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the “Day,” “Night” or “Auto” soft-key. Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
•Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
•Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
•Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-
gation system (if equipped). Touch the Set Language
soft-key, then touch the desired language soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
•Units
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch “US” or
“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the “Brief” or “Detailed” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the “Touchscreen Beep” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
•Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” soft-key the following settings
will be available:
•Sync Time With GPS
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, touch
the “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
•Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection, touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
adjust the hours up or down. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the” X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
•Set Time Minutes
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection, touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
adjust the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
•Time Format
When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Touch the “Time Format” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available:
•Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, touch and release the “Near” or “Far”
button. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
•Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make
your selection, touch the “Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu. For further information,
refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitiga-
tion” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If Equipped
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sets the distance at
which the steering wheel will provide feedback for
potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set
to provide either an early, medium or late warning zone
start point. To make your selection, touch the “Lane
Departure Warning” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
•Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Strength — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
departure can be set at Low, Medium or High. To make
your selection, touch the “Lane Departure Warning”
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
ParkSense® status, touch and release the “Sound Only”
or “Sounds and Display” button. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
•Front ParkSense® Chime Volume — If Equipped
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
selected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if
equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW, ME-
DIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is
MEDIUM. To make your selection, touch the “ParkSense®
Front Chime Volume” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been se-
lected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
•Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume — If Equipped
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be se-
lected from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if equipped.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To make your selection, touch the “ParkSense® Rear
Chime Volume” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration
state through ignition cycles.
•ParkSense® Park Assist Braking — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the park assist system will
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to stop the vehicle. To make your
selection, touch the “ParkSense® Park Assist Braking”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer
to “ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and oper-
ating information.
•Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors
will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN
position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE
position. The mirrors will move back to their previous
position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
To make your selection, touch the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-
cating that the setting had been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•Paddle Shifting — If Equipped
Selecting this feature enables the use of steering wheel
paddle switches for shifting in manual mode. To make
your selection, touch the “Paddle Shifting” soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
•Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in
your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will
only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When
“Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior
mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is
on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert
status, touch the “Off,” “Lights” or “Lights & Chime”
soft-key. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
•ParkView® Backup Camera — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, touch the “ParkView Backup Camera” soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that
the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
touch the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to see
straight grid line overlay over the ParkView Back up
camera display whenever the shift lever is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your
selection, touch the “ParkView Backup Camera Static
Gridlines” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
•ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” soft-key, the “settings” soft-key, then the
“Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key. Press the
“Parkview Backup camera Delay” soft-key to turn the
ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
•Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
“Rain Sensing” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
•Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the “Hill Start Assist” soft-key, until a check-mark ap-
pears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” soft-key the following set-
tings will be available:
•Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
touch the “+” or “–” soft-key to select your desired time
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
•Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature. To
make your selection, touch the “Headlights With Wipers”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will
deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make
your selection, touch the “Auto High Beams” soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights / Smart-
Beam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
•Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the “Daytime Running Lights” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
•Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the “Flash Head-
lights with Lock” soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available:
•Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
touch the “Sound Horn With Lock” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must push
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Push
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first push of
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Push Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Push Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro-
grammed, touching the handle more than once will only
result in the driver’s door opening. If Driver’s Door first
is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior
door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors
(or use RKE transmitter).
•Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
your selection, touch the “Passive Entry” soft-key, until a
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-
Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
•Memory To FOB — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the “Memory Linked
To FOB” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
soft-key the following settings will be available:
•Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key, until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
turn on. To make your selection, touch the “Auto Heated
Seats” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
After touching the “Engine Off Options” soft-key the
following settings will be available:
•Easy Exit Seats
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats soft-
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
•Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the “0 seconds,”
“45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” soft-key. Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.
•Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status, touch the “+” or “–” soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” soft-key the fol-
lowing settings will be available:
•Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials, such as iPod’s®, Mo-
bile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors, away from the
top of the instrument panel where the compass module is
located. These materials can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
•Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the “Calibration” soft-key to change this setting.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
Compass Variance Map
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
also calibrate the compass by pressing the “ON” soft-key
and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” soft-key the following set-
tings will be available:
•Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
•Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between
the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back arrow
soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
•Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
touch the “Off,” “1,” “2” or ”3” soft-key. Then touch the
back arrow soft-key.
•Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, touch the “Surround Sound”
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the back
arrow soft-key.
•AUX Volume Match — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
To make your selection, touch the “AUX Volume Match”
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the back
arrow soft-key.
•Loudness — If Equipped
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run
or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
To make your selection, touch the “Loudness” soft-key,
select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow
soft-key.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After touching the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key the
following settings will be available:
•Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the “SIRIUS” Setup soft-key the following
settings will be available:
•Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select
the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing
the back arrow soft-key.
•Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Touch the “Subscription Info” soft-key to access the
Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” soft-key the follow-
ing settings will be available:
•Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset Display, Clock,
Audio, and Radio Settings to their default. To restore the
settings to their default setting touch the “Yes” or “No”
soft-key. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
Clear Personal Data
After touching the “Clear Personal Data Settings” soft-
key the following settings will be available:
•Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To Clear Per-
sonal Data touch the “Yes” or “No” soft-key. A check
mark will appear in the box when selected. Then touch
the back arrow soft-key.
SRT Performance Features
To access the SRT Performance Features, touch the
Uconnect® “APPS” soft-key then touch the “SRT Perfor-
mance” soft-key. Press the UP or DOWN soft-key to cycle
through the features. Press the feature soft-key to select
that feature.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Features is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The Performance Features include the following:
•Timers
•Engine Values
•Digital Gauge Displays
•0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
•Braking Distance
•1/8 Mile (200 meter)
•1/4 Mile (400 meter)
•Instantaneous G-Force
•Peak G-Force
•Digital Speedometer
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Timers
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h), 1/8 Mile (200 meter), 1/4 Mile
(400 meter)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h),
1/8 mile (200 meter) or 1/4 mile (400 meter).
•The feature will be “ready” when the vehicle speed is
at 0 mph (0 km/h).
•Soft-keys allow access to the current, best and last
times recorded.
Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
depressed.
•This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
•The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com-
plete stop.
G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
When a force greater than zero is measured, the display
will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls,
the peak forces will continue to display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Gauges 1
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
•Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the
gauge.
•Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
•Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
Gauges 2
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
•Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature within the range of
the gauge.
•Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the
gauge.
•Transmission Temperature
Shows the actual transmission temperature within the
range of the gauge.
•Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature within the range
of the gauge.
•Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
•Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine
When selected, this screen displays miles per hour (mph),
horsepower (hp), torque (ft/lb), oil pressure (psi) and
gear selector values.
Handling
When selected, this screen displays peak g-force, steering
and yaw angles.
Options
When selected, this screen allows you to choose a stan-
dard or customize display for your SRT home page.
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supple-
ment Manual.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Uconnect® REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your
favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray™ Discs, listen to audio
over the wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety
of standard video games or audio devices. Please review
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
and operation.
Getting Started
•Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the
LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover. •Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
•Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray™ Disc
Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray™ Disc Player, the
icon will be present on the Player.
Rear Seat Entertainment System Screen
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by press-
ing the Power button on the remote control.
•When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu-
ray™ Disc is inserted into the Disc player, the screen(s)
turn(s) ON automatically, the headphone transmitters
turn ON and playback begins.
•With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to
Screen 1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the
Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2
(passenger’s side).
Rear Seat Entertainment System Channel 1 (Rear 1) Rear Seat Entertainment System Remote Control
Channel Selector
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
•The system can be controlled by the front seat occu-
pants utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the
rear seat occupants using the remote control.
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
•The Remote Control
•The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Rear Seat Entertainment System Headphone Channel
Selector
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blu-ray™ Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is located in the center console.
To view a Blu-ray™ insert the disc into the Blu-ray™ Disc
Player. Playback will begin automatically after the Blu-
ray™ Disc is recognized by the disc drive. If playback
does not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into
Blu-ray™ Disc Player follow these steps:
Using The Touchscreen Radio
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Location
Rear Media Control Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
•Press the Media soft-key, then touch the Rear Media
soft key.
•Touch the OK soft-key to begin playing the Blu-ray™
Disc on the touchscreen radio.
Using The Remote Control
•Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen),
then press the source key and using the up and down
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
button.
•Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
and options.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on
the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
directly from a video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3
player.
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
audio/video jacks:
1. HDMI Input
2. Right audio in (red)
3. Left audio in (white)
4. Video in (yellow)
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation4
and XBox One will exceed this power limit of the vehicle’s
Power Inverter.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc with the label facing as
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player. The
radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after
the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc on Rear 1 (driver’s
side rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc on Rear 2 (passen-
ger’s side rear passenger) ensure the Remote Control
and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then press
ENTER/OK.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the Media soft-key on the Uconnect® radio
touchscreen.
2. Touch the Rear Media soft-key to display the Rear
Media Control screen.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment Screen
Rear Media Control Screen
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key, the select source soft-key and
then the DISC soft-key in the MEDIA column. To exit
touch the X at the top right of the screen.
NOTE:
Touching the screen on a Touchscreen radio while a
DVD or Blu-ray™ Disc is playing, brings up the basic remote
control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play,
Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
will turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
•
The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
•The Blu-ray™ Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray™ Discs.
•Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source
will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
•Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source
will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
•Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the screen(s) are closed.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Remote Control — If
Equipped Controls And Indicators
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. SOURCE — Press to enter Source Selection screen.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Chan-
nel 1 (left screen). When the selector switch is in the
Rear 2 position, the remote controls the functionality
of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
5. 䉴— Press to navigate menus.
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. SETUP — Press to access the screen settings menu.
7. 䉴䉴— Press and hold to fast forward through the
current audio track or video chapter.
8. 䉴/㥋(Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause disc
play.
9. Four Colored Buttons — Press to access Blu-ray™ Disc
features.
10. POPUP/MENU — Press to bring up repeat and
shuffle options, the Blu-ray™ Disc popup menu, the
DVD title menu or to access disc menus.
11. KEYPAD — Press to navigate chapters or titles.
12. ▪(Stop) — Stops disc play.
13. 䉳䉳 — Press and hold to fast rewind through the
current audio track or video chapter.
14. Mutes headphone audio.
15. BACK — Press to exit out of menus or return to
source selection screen.
16. 䉲— Press to navigate menus.
17. OK — Press to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
18. 䉳— Press to navigate menus.
19. 䉱— Press to navigate menus.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op-
eration. To replace the batteries:
•Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
•Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
•Replace the battery compartment cover.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not
muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on
the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that
fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
NOTE:
•When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the
Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
•When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the
Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones
are tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Press the SOURCE button on the remote control.
3. Pressing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi-
gate to the available modes and press the OK button to
select the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
BACK button on the remote control.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
•Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
downward.
•Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
•Replace the battery compartment cover.
Unwired® Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙or ⬙your⬙) of this
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire-
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer-
able.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replace-
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT-
ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DE-
FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PU-
NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired® Do?
Unwired®, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® reserves
the right to replace any discontinued Product with a
comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PROD-
UCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
(EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY
OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICU-
LAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-
3332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a
list of all commands which control playback of the disc.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray™ Disc or DVD
Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.),
pressing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appear-
ance of the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circum-
stances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navi-
gation buttons (䉱,䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴,䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER/OK
button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray™ Disc player’s
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
Video Screen Display Settings
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
•Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
•Close the video screen.
•To change the current audio mode, press the remote
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically se-
lect the next available audio mode without using the
Mode/Source Select menu.
•When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of the playing the
following types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
•BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1),
•DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
DVD-VR
•CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
•DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions3–6)
profile 3.0
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray™ Disc player and many DVD discs are
coded by geographic region. These region codes must
match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for
the DVD disc does not match the region code for the
player, the disc will not play.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray™ Disc
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray™ Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW
discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or re-
corded) are not supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray™ Disc player may not be able
to play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guide-
lines when recording discs.
•Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
•For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
supported.
•The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
•Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the Blu-ray™ Disc player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about
burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of playing MP3
(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media
Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
CD-RW).
•The Blu-ray™ Disc player always uses the file exten-
sion to determine the audio format, so MP3 files must
always end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙or ⬙.MP3⬙and
WMA files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙
or ⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
•For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
•Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The Blu-ray™ player will automatically skip the file
and begin playing the next available file.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
•Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray™
player will automatically skip the file and begin play-
ing the next available file.
•If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
•To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
Blu-ray™ Disc player’s 䉱button to advance to the
next file, or the 䉲button to return to the start of the
current or previous file.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray™ Disc player is unable to read the disc, a
⬙Disc Error⬙message is displayed on the rear screen and
Radio displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc
format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray™
Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the
end of the disc is reached, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will
return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play
the start of the first track.
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Blu-ray™ Disc player may shut down during ex-
tremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s inte-
rior temperature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this
occurs, the player will display ⬙High Temp⬙and will shut
off the Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics
of the Blu-ray™ Disc player.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home or other limited viewing uses other-
wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby® Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙,
⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
reserved.
General Information
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system dis-
play.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Ra-
dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
General Overview
Hard-Keys
The hard-keys are located below the Uconnect® screen.
Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-Keys
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-Keys And
Soft-Keys)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the hard-key button for warmer tempera-
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
soft-key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key
for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the soft-
key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. SYNC
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either hard-keys or soft-keys as follows:
Hard-Key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
Soft-Key
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
•Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up
and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
•Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demis-
ter outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
•Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
•Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
•Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side win-
dow demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. When
the defrost mode is selected, the blower level may
will increase.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperature
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the soft-
key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-key for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the hard-key button for warmer temperature
settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the soft-
key temperature bar towards the red arrow soft-key for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE:
In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
15. Temperature Control (5.0 Radio Only)
Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the tempera-
ture of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving
the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
area indicates cooler temperatures.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
NOTE:
•If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
•If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C
is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Con-
trols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recircula-
tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is se-
lected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once
the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the Uconnect® customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in this
section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-
quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion pro-
tection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution
of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that
meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard
MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Main-
tenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication
to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win-
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
•Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
•Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵STARTING PROCEDURES ................381
▫Automatic Transmission ................381
▫Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ..................382
▫Normal Starting.......................382
▫Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) ................384
▫If Engine Fails To Start .................384
▫After Starting ........................386
䡵AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............386
▫Key Ignition Park Interlock...............387
▫Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .388
▫Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode ..............388
▫Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission .......389
䡵PADDLE SHIFT MODE ..................397
▫Operation ...........................397
䡵SELEC-TRAC® — IF EQUIPPED ............399
▫Description ..........................399
▫Active Damping System .................401
▫Launch Mode — If Equipped .............401
5
䡵DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............402
▫Flowing/Rising Water ..................403
䡵POWER STEERING .....................404
䡵FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY —
IF EQUIPPED..........................405
䡵PARKING BRAKE ......................406
䡵ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .409
▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............409
▫Traction Control System (TCS) ............409
▫Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............410
▫Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........411
▫Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........412
▫ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light ................416
▫Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..............417
䡵TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............418
▫Tire Markings ........................418
▫Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........422
▫Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........423
▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........425
䡵TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........429
▫Tire Pressure ........................429
▫Tire Inflation Pressures .................430
▫Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .432
▫Radial Ply Tires ......................432
▫Tire Types ...........................433
▫Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............434
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............435
▫Tire Spinning ........................437
▫Tread Wear Indicators ..................438
▫Life Of Tire .........................438
▫Replacement Tires .....................439
䡵TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....441
䡵TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .442
▫Premium System — If Equipped ...........445
▫Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings ...........................446
▫General Information ...................450
䡵FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................450
▫6.4L Engine ..........................450
▫Reformulated Gasoline .................451
▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............451
▫E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......452
▫MMT In Gasoline .....................452
▫Materials Added To Fuel ................453
▫Fuel System Cautions...................453
▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............454
䡵ADDING FUEL ........................455
▫Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release.........458
䡵VEHICLE LOADING ....................459
▫Certification Label ....................459
䡵TRAILER TOWING .....................461
▫Common Towing Definitions .............461
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
▫Trailer Hitch Classification ...............464
▫Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ......................465
▫Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(SRT Models) — If Equipped .............465
▫Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............467
▫Towing Requirements ..................468
▫Towing Tips .........................472
䡵RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ............474
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
•When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖmode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ACC or RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
•Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will
shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is
in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once, the Driver Information Display (DID) will dis-
play a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
•Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
•Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (DID will display
“ACC”),
•Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (DID will
display “ON/RUN”),
•Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (DID will
display “OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
(Continued)
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
•If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
•Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
(Continued)
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-
hicle against unwanted movement.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehi-
cle’s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi-
tions. Press the “ECO” switch in the center stack of the
instrument panel and a green light will indicate the ECO
mode is engaged.
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
•The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
•The transmission will launch (from a stop) in second
gear.
•The torque converter clutch may engage at lower
engine speeds and remain on longer.
•The engine idle speed will be lower.
•The overall driving performance will be more conser-
vative.
•Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhib-
ited based on temperature and other factors.
NOTE: ECO mode is only available in AUTO mode.
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
efficient eight-speed transmission. The electronic shift
lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional
shifter. Instead, the shift lever is spring loaded and moves
forward and rearward, always returning to the center
position after each gear is selected. The transmission gear
(PRND) is displayed both on the shift lever and in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). To select a
gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever and
move the lever rearward or forward. You must also press
the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or
to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
“Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this sec-
tion). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
PARK to DRIVE), move the lever past the first (or second)
detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE and SPORT shift positions. Once in
the DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever rearward will
toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE mode. You do
not need to press the shift lever button when toggling
between DRIVE and SPORT modes. Manual shifts can be
made using the shift paddles mounted on the steering
wheel. Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the
DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the trans-
mission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster. Refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙in this
section for further information.
Shift Lever
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
•Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
•Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
WARNING! (Continued)
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission shifter. Do not leave the Key
Fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location acces-
sible to children), and do not leave the ignition (in
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in
the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
•Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must start the engine, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
CAUTION!
•DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must start the engine, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
•When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and push the lever all the way forward until
it stops. When released, the lever will return to its
home position.
•With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), select TOW mode (refer to
⬙Selec-Trac®⬙in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙) or use the
Paddle Shift switches (refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙in this
section for further information) to select a lower gear.
Under these conditions, using TOW mode or a lower
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depend-
ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT (S)
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
creased to make full use of available engine power. To
switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes, tap the shift
lever rearward. SPORT mode is only accessible from
DRIVE.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en-
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Press and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnos-
tic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
When To Use TOW Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, select TOW mode, using the rotary switch on the
center console. Selecting TOW mode will improve per-
formance and reduce the potential for transmission over-
heating or failure due to excessive shifting. Refer to
“Selec-Trac®” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
PADDLE SHIFT MODE
Paddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you more
control of the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maxi-
mize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situa-
tions.
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
will operate automatically, shifting between the eight
available gears. To engage Paddle Shift mode, simply tap
one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-)
while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter
Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter Paddle Shift
mode will retain the current gear. When Paddle Shift
mode is active, the current transmission gear is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
•Normally, in Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will
automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is
reached. If, however, Paddle Shift is engaged while in
SPORT or TRACK mode, the transmission will remain
in the selected gear even when maximum engine
speed is reached. The transmission will upshift only
when commanded by the driver.
•The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
•The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
•You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
•If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
•The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
•Holding the (-) paddle depressed will progressively
downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible
at the current speed.
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
•Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Paddle Shift mode is enabled.
•The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage Paddle Shift mode, press and hold the (+)
shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again displayed in
the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the
Paddle Shift mode at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SELEC-TRAC® — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Selec-Trac® combines the capabilities of the vehicle con-
trol systems, along with driver input, to provide the best
performance for all terrains.
Selec-Trac® Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
Selec-Trac® consists of the following positions:
•Sport – Dry weather, on-road calibration. Performance
based tuning that provides a rear wheel drive feel but
with improved handling and acceleration over a two-
wheel drive vehicle. The customer has the option of
going to partial ESC. The active suspension system
will be in Semi Firm mode, and a green flag will light
up in the instrument cluster. The transmission will
provide a more aggressive shifting pattern (Refer to
“Paddle Shift Mode” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information). This feature will reset to AUTO
on an ignition cycle.
•Snow – Tuning set for additional stability in inclement
weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces
such as snow. When in Snow mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may
use second gear (rather than first gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
•Auto – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide im-
proved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles. The active suspension system will be in
Touring Mode.
•Track – Track road calibration for use on high traction
surfaces. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some
binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The
electronic brake controls are set to Partial OFF to limit
traction control management of throttle and wheel
spin.
•The transmission will be in SPORT mode and pro-
vide a more aggressive shifting pattern. Refer to
“Paddle Shift Mode” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
•The customer has the option of going to FULL OFF
with no interaction from the ESC System. The active
suspension system will be in Full Firm mode.
•This feature will reset to AUTO on an ignition cycle.
•Tow – Use this mode for towing. Vehicle suspension
will go to Firm mode. Trailer sway control is enabled
in the ESC system. The terrain switch will remain in
this position through an ignition cycle until the cus-
tomer cycles into another position.
Active Damping System
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled
damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch
in many driving situations including cornering, accelera-
tion and braking. There are 3 modes:
•Touring Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO
and SNOW) — Used during highway speeds where a
touring suspension feel is desired.
•Firm Mode (Available in terrain positions SPORT and
TOW) — Provides a firm suspension for better han-
dling.
•Full Firm (Available in TRACK mode) — Provides a
full firm suspension for an aggressive track experience.
Launch Mode — If Equipped
This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight
line racing. To use Launch Mode please follow the steps
below:
1. Bring vehicle to complete stop on a level track surface
with the engine running.
2. Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving.
3. Fully press the brake pedal.
4. Press and release the “LAUNCH” Button.
5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
NOTE: If the cluster launch EVIC message indicates all
conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is
pressed to the floor quickly (within approximately 1/2
second) the system will hold the engine speed to a preset
speed (below the engine rev limiter speed).
6. Release the brake pedal.
Pressing the launch control button when launch control is
active will deactivate launch control.
NOTE:
•
Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum RPM and
waits for the driver to release the brake. Launch Mode
then uses engine throttle only to achieve controlled
wheelslip for maximum acceleration through first gear.
•Launch Mode can be initiated in any of the Select Trac
Modes.
•Launch Mode is not available until the 500 mile
(805 km) break-in has been achieved.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
CAUTION!
•Due to lower ground clearance, driving your ve-
hicle up steep driveways, approach ramps or near
parking blocks may cause damage to the front
fascia and ground effects.
•Driving through snow more than 4 inches (100 mm)
deep may cause damage to the front fascia and
ground effects.
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
•Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
CAUTION!
•Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
•Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
•
Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Parking Brake
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
•This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
WARNING! (Continued)
•When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, re-
move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
•Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those result-
ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
•The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
•The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
•The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
•Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent col-
lisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
(Continued)
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
The ESC system has three available operating modes.
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor-
mally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momen-
tarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
•When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
tem is reduced.
•Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖmode.
ESC OFF Switch
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
Full Off
This mode is available in TRACK mode only. Refer to
“Selec-Terrain” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability
features are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode,
press and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds
while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running.
After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate,
and the ⬙ESC OFF⬙message will display in the vehicle
odometer. Press and release the TRIP ODOMETER but-
ton located on the instrument cluster to clear this mes-
sage. The “ESC OFF” message may appear in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC
Off” switch.
NOTE: The ⬙ESC OFF⬙message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
into the PARK position from any position other than
PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
will occur when the message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. There-
fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ⴖESC Offⴖmode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
NOTE:
When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential. If
one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow
more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not
spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with tire chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESC mode is intended for off-highway or off-
road only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN
position.
•Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
cycled off previously.
•The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-
priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop
all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this sec-
tion for further information. When TSC is functioning,
the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation
5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
•High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
TorS= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R= Construction code
—⬙R⬙means radial construction
—⬙D⬙means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H= Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period.
Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Term Definition
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
•If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
•Safety
•Economy
•Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
•Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
•Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-
tion.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
•Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
•Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
•Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
•The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙(6 mm).
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a au-
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the “all
season” designation or “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•Driving style
•Tire pressure
•Distance driven
•Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
WARNING!
•Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
•Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with run flat tires — When
the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of 14 psi (96 kPa) or
lower, always check tire pressure and replace the tire at
the first opportunity. At inflation pressure of/or below
14 psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the run-flat mode of
operation. In this condition, it is recommended a vehicle
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for a maximum
distance of 50 miles (80 km). Chrysler Group LLC does
not recommend using the run flat feature while driving a
vehicle loaded at full capacity or towing a trailer.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the up-
dated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 33 psi
(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still
be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
CAUTION!
•The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage
to the sensors may result.
•After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
•The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
•The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
•Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
•Receiver Module
•Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
•Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message in the tire
graphic display screen with the pressure value(s) and the
low tire(s) “flashing.” or in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to
XXX⬙message will also be displayed. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” or in a
different color on the graphic display to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure as shown in the ⬙Inflate
to XXX⬙message. The system will automatically update,
the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop
“flashing,” or return to the original color and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault is detected possibly related an incorrect sensor
location fault. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙message exists.
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare
tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a
chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a
“flashing” or different color pressure value in the
graphic display. An ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙message will still
be displayed.
•After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch
cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙message for three seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value. Once you repair or replace the original road tire,
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
ing licenses:
United States MRXC4W4MA4
Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.4L Engine
The 6.4L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
higher.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•Operate in a lean mode.
•OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
•Poor engine performance.
•Poor cold start and cold drivability.
•Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
•Change the engine oil and oil filter.
•Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
•An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
CAUTION! (Continued)
•The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4.
Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the nozzle
opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
•Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
•A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
•Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
•Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
Fuel Filler Door
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
•Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
open.
•Pour fuel into funnel opening.
•Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
•Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
•Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
•A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the
center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the
fuel door latch to the closed position.
NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should
be manually returned to the closed position.
Release Cable
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙condition. The recommended way to measure
GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the
scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear
GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification La-
bel” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
•An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
•
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/
Transmission
GCWR
(Gross Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
6.4L Automatic 12,600 lbs
(5 715 kg)
40 sq. ft.
(3.72 sq m)
7,200 lbs (3 265 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
•The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire–
Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
•Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend using the
run flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or towing a trailer.
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(SRT Models) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch re-
ceiver cover, this must be removed to access the trailer
hitch receiver (if equipped). This hitch receiver cover is
located at the bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of
the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
NOTE: Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the
locking retainer if needed for added leverage.
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you).
3. Lower back down to disengage the tabs located at the
top of the hitch receiver cover and then pull outwards
to remove.
Hitch Receiver Cover Retainer
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainer
Hitch Receiver Cover
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing repeat
the procedure in reverse order.
NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front
of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow
hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or
heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle
and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the
cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maxi-
mum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.
Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•The tongue weight of the trailer
•The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
•The weight of the driver and all passengers
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading In-
formation Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for fur-
ther information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
•Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
•Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
•When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
WARNING! (Continued)
•Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖthe trailer wheels.
•GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydrau-
lic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have an accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of
you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
•Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
•Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
1,653 lbs (750 kg).
Towing Requirements — Tires
•Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
•Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
inspection procedure.
•When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Tips
NOTE: To provide optimum towing performance and to
protect transmission components always select TOW
mode when towing a trailer. Before setting out on a trip,
practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an
area away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shift-
ing does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW mode, or use
the Paddle Shift switches to manually select a lower gear.
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
TOW Mode
To reduce the potential for automatic transmission over-
heating, select TOW mode when driving in hilly areas, or
select a lower gear (using the Paddle Shift switches) on
more severe grades.
Paddle Shift Mode
•When using the Paddle Shift switches, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
•To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
•Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
•Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing is not allowed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with any of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ground.
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........476
䡵IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............476
䡵WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................477
▫Torque Specifications ...................477
䡵JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........479
▫Run Flat Tires ........................479
▫Jack Location ........................480
▫Spare Tire Stowage ....................481
▫Preparations For Jacking ................481
▫Jacking Instructions ...................482
▫Road Tire Installation ...................489
䡵JUMP-STARTING ......................490
▫Preparations For Jump-Start ..............491
▫Jump-Starting Procedure ................493
䡵FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............495
䡵EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .497
䡵MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................497
䡵TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........501
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
•On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns
478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Run Flat Tires
This vehicle is equipped with “run flat” tires. Run flat
tires allow the vehicle to be driven approximately
50 miles (80km) at 55 mph (88km/h). Tire service should
be obtained to avoid prolonged run flat feature usage.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479
NOTE: This vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire.
The spare tire must be used for the rear wheel(s) only. For
a flat front tire, move the rear tire to the front and use the
spare tire on the rear.
WARNING!
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” is illuminated. Vehicle
handling and braking may be reduced. You could
have a collision and be severely or fatally injured.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Spare Tire Label
480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE:
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located
on top of the spare tire. If your vehicle is out of fuel and an
auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the filler
neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. For more information
on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to “Adding Fuel” in
“Starting And Operating” in this manual.
Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear
cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing
nut.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
Jack Storage Location 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the
jacking position. For example, if
changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
7. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift® refer to
“Quadra-Lift® — If Equipped” in “Starting And Op-
erating” for further information on disabling auto-
matic leveling.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
•Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
•Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. This vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire. The
spare tire must be used for the rear wheel(s) only. For
a flat front tire, move the rear tire to the front and use
the spare tire on the rear.
3. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
4. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Spare Tire Label
Jack And Tool Assembly
484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Jacking Locations Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485
6. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
Front Jacking Location Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the
spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum sta-
bility.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
8. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
9. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
11. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For correct lug nut
torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or at a service station.
12. Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return
it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam
tray.
13. Remove the small center cap and securely store the
road wheel in the cargo area.
Mounting Spare Tire
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
14. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
soon as possible, properly secure the spare tire with
the special wing nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m),
reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the
rear load floor cover.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
Stowed Spare 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passen-
ger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
WARNING!
•Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
•Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables
do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote posi-
tive (+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to
remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5.
Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1.
Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the dis-
charged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi-
tive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested
at your authorized dealer.
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial
Off⬙mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
press the ⬙ESC Off⬙switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
•When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
•Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
•Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
•Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
ing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis-
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal
latch in towards the tether strap.
Manual Park Release Cover
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. While the metal latch is in the open position, simulta-
neously pull upwards on the tether strap until the
lever clicks and latches in the released position. The
transmission is now out of PARK and the vehicle can
be moved.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
Release Latch Released Position 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention-
ally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension
upward while pushing the release latch towards the
tether to unlock the lever.
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has
been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks
into position.
Release Latch
500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
in place.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for loading onto a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
•
Towing this vehicle using any other method can cause
severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
•Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Stowed Position 6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L ..........505
䡵ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .506
䡵EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................507
䡵REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................508
䡵DEALER SERVICE ......................508
䡵MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........509
▫Engine Oil ..........................510
▫Engine Oil Filter ......................513
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................513
▫Maintenance-Free Battery ...............514
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance .............516
▫Body Lubrication .....................518
▫Windshield Wiper Blades ...............519
▫Adding Washer Fluid ..................521
▫Exhaust System ......................522
▫Cooling System ......................524
▫Brake System ........................530
▫Front/Rear Axle Fluid ..................532
▫Transfer Case ........................534
7
▫Automatic Transmission ................534
▫Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................537
䡵FUSES ..............................542
▫Power Distribution Center ...............543
䡵VEHICLE STORAGE ....................550
䡵REPLACEMENT BULBS .................551
䡵BULB REPLACEMENT ..................552
▫High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped ...........................553
▫Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped ........553
▫Front Turn Signal .....................554
▫Front Fog Lamps .....................554
▫Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamps .............................555
▫Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp ..........556
▫Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .558
▫Rear License Lamp ....................558
䡵FLUID CAPACITIES ....................559
䡵FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................560
▫Engine .............................560
▫Chassis ............................561
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
•The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
•The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding one quart of oil
when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
NOTE: Fill engine oil one quart at a time.
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration
or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
•
Operating the engine with the oil levels below the
safe zone, or operating with oil levels that exceed the
top of the safe zone may cause engine damage.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
SAE 0W-40 engine oil or equivalent meeting the require-
ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity
Use Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 engine or equivalent
MOPAR® oil meeting the Chrysler Material Standard
MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
WARNING! (Continued)
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
CAUTION!
•Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter
motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
•
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•When temperatures are below the freezing point,
electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do
not attempt jump-starting because the battery
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Battery temperature must be brought above the
freezing point before attempting a jump-start.
•Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by moving
fan blades.
•Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
•Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
•Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of
the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
•Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6.
Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover,
make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up-
ward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
1—WiperArm
2 — Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
•Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
•When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) only by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS-12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS-12106), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
•Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
•This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To pre-
vent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
•Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen-
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
•Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
NOTE:
•Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
•Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
•Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-
12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
•If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing cap. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low,
check system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
WARNING! (Continued)
•To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
•Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with
cast iron housings.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom-
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•Stone and gravel impact.
•Insects, tree sap and tar.
•Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
•If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
•Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
•Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
Special Care
•If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
•All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
•To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window
equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1.
Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
•Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
•If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
(Continued)
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge
fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description
of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside
cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped
on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center 7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F03 60 Amp Yellow Rad Fan
F05 40 Amp Green Compressor for Air Suspension - If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green
Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
F07 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid
F08 40 Amp Green Emission Sensors (Diesel engine only)
F09 40 Amp Green Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine only)
F10 40 Amp Green Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
F11 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Electric Brake - If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green Body Controller #3 / Interior Lights
F13 40 Amp Green Blower Motor Front
F14 40 Amp Green Body Controller #4 / Power Locks
F17 30 Amp Pink Headrest Release - If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module
F22 20 Amp Blue Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink Body Controller #1
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F24 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers
F26 30 Amp Pink
Antilock Brakes/Stability Control Module/Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Backup Lights - If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Parking Lights - If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
F32 30 Amp Pink Drive Train Control Module
F34 30 Amp Pink Slip Differential Control
F35 30 Amp Pink Sunroof - If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster
F37 30 Amp Pink Rear Blower - If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter 115V AC - If Equipped
F39 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate - If Equipped
F40 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights
F42 20 Amp Yellow Horn
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F44 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor - If Equipped
F49 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack / Climate Control
F50 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module - If Equipped
F51 10 Amp Red Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition /
Steering Column Lock
F52 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If
Equipped
F56 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
F57 15 Amp Blue Transmission
F59 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
F60 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
F62 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F64 25 Amp Natural Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
F66 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches / Rain
Sensor
F67 15 Amp Blue CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module - If
Equipped
F68 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F70 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F71 30 Amp Green Audio Amplifier
F73 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps Right
F74 20 Amp Yellow Brake Vacuum Pump - If Equipped
F76 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
F77 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
F78 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric Power
Steering - If Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F80 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass /
Anti-Intrusion Module
F81 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
F82 10 Amp Red
Steering Column Control Module/ Cruise Control
F83 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
F85 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 10 Amp Red Air Suspension – If Equipped/ Trailer Tow /
Steering Column Control Module
F88 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
F92 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp - If Equipped
F93 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 10 Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case Module
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F95 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Park Assist
F96 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch / Flashlamp Charger -
If Equipped
F97 25 Amp Natural Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel - If
Equipped
F98 25 Amp Natural Front Heated Seats - If Equipped
F99 10 Amp Red Climate Control / Driver Assistance Systems
Module
F100 10 Amp Red Active Damping - If Equipped
F101 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams - If
Equipped
F103 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater (Diesel engine only)
F104 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
CAUTION!
•When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
•Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Glove Box Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console
Reading Lamps
VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Underpanel Courtesy
Lamps
906
Instrument Cluster
(General Illumination)
103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamps (Low Beam) H11
Premium Headlamps
(Low/High Beam)
D3S (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
Headlamps (High Beam) 9005
Premium Park/Turn
Signal Lamp
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
3157K
Premium Daytime
Running Lamp (DRL)
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11
Front Side Marker W5W
Premium Front Side
Marker - If Equipped
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp T20
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
Bulb Number
Rear Body Side Turn
Signal Lamps
7440NA (WY21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail
Lamps
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
Rear Body Side Stop
Lamps
P27/7W
Rear Body Side Tail
Lamps
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
Bulb Number
CHMSL - Center High
Mounted Stop Lamp
LED - (Service at
Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be
purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
charge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned
on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the
system charges.
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter-
clockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp
connector.
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
front fog lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing.
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
•Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from
lamp.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
Tail Lamp Push Pins
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s)
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps 1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket 7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high mounted stop lamp is LED. Service at
Authorized Dealer.
Rear License Lamp
1. The rear license lamps are LED. Service at Authorized
Dealer.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 25 Gallons 94 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
16 Quarts 15.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils
that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 or
equivalent MOPAR® engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs. (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher.
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85.
Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85 with friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4,
MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............564 ▫Required Maintenance Intervals ...........565
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual
must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect
your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle perfor-
mance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be
needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as
dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and
service should also be done anytime a malfunction is sus-
pected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped
vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the
EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil
change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indi-
cator message will illuminate. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil if
it has been six months since your last oil change, even if
the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
•Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
564 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Stop For Fuel
•Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
•Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
•Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
needed.
•Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•Change the engine oil filter.
•Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 565
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Ser-
vice Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
566 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, sustained high speed driving, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 567
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
568 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for po-
lice, taxi, fleet, sustained high speed
driving, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 569
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏Inspect the accessory drive belt(s), replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, sustained high speed driving, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
570 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 571
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for po-
lice, taxi, fleet, sustained high speed
driving, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
572 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
❏Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the spark plugs. *
* The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not
apply.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 573
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for po-
lice, taxi, fleet, sustained high speed
driving, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
574 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months or 150,000 miles (250 000 km)
whichever comes first.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, sustained high speed driving, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 575
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
576 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for po-
lice, taxi, fleet, sustained high speed
driving, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
❏Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect
the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 577
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear.
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Drain the transfer case and refill.
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) or
120 months whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
578 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
•You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
•Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 579
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................583
▫Prepare For The Appointment.............583
▫Prepare A List ........................583
▫Be Reasonable With Requests .............583
䡵IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............583
▫Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center.......584
▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ......584
▫In Mexico Contact:.....................585
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ...........585
▫Service Contract ......................585
䡵WARRANTY INFORMATION .............586
䡵MOPAR®PARTS.......................587
䡵REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............587
▫In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................587
▫In Canada...........................587
䡵PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............588
9
䡵DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................589
▫Treadwear...........................589
▫Traction Grades .......................589
▫Temperature Grades....................590
582 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 583
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
•If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•Owner’s name and address
•Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•Authorized dealer name
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426–5337
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
584 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 585
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
586 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 587
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
588 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
•1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 589
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
590 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .194
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............527
Adding Fuel .............................455
Additives, Fuel ...........................453
Airbag..................................69
Airbag Deployment ........................81
Airbag Light .............................77
Airbag Maintenance ........................83
Airbag, Side ..............................72
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ................73
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .513
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................516
Air Conditioning Filter .....................375
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............376
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .................516
Air Conditioning System ....................373
Air Pressure, Tires.........................430
Alarm
Arm The System ........................20
Tamper Alert ...........................22
Alarm, Panic .............................26
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................20
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..................526
Disposal ..............................529
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................409
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................288
Appearance Care .........................537
Auto Down Power Windows ..................43
Automatic Door Locks ......................34
Automatic Headlights ......................171
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........373
Automatic Transmission ....................389
Adding Fluid ..........................536
Autostick .............................397
Fluid and Filter Changes ..................536
Fluid Change ..........................536
Fluid Level Check .......................534
592 INDEX
Fluid Type ............................534
Gear Ranges ...........................391
Special Additives .......................535
Autostick ...............................397
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........262
Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................262
Axle Fluid ..............................561
Battery.................................305
Charging .............................305
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........26
Belts, Seat ...............................54
Blind Spot Monitoring ......................136
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................518
B-Pillar Location ..........................425
Brake Assist System .......................410
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............409
Brake Fluid .............................531
Brake System ............................530
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................409
Fluid Check ...........................531
Master Cylinder ........................531
Parking ..............................406
Warning Light .........................291
Brake/Transmission Interlock .................388
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........110
Bulb Replacement .........................551
Bulbs, Light .............................114
Camera, Rear ............................239
Capacities, Fluid ..........................559
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ...........................512
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................528
Carbon Monoxide Warning ..................111
Cargo Area Cover .........................276
Cargo Area Features .......................273
Cargo Compartment .......................273
10
INDEX 593
Light ................................274
Cargo Light .............................274
Cargo Tie-Downs .........................277
Car Washes .............................537
Cellular Phone ...........................364
Center High Mounted Stop Light ..............558
Certification Label.........................459
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................420
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .507
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............111
Checks, Safety............................111
Child Restraint ............................85
Child Restraints
Child Seat Installation ....................104
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint .....99
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt ..............................101
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......92
Child Safety Locks .........................35
Clean Air Gasoline ........................451
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................539
Climate Control ..........................365
Cold Weather Operation ....................384
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............363
Compact Spare Tire........................435
Console, Overhead ........................242
Contract, Service ..........................585
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........528
Cooling System...........................524
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............527
Coolant Capacity .......................559
Coolant Level ..........................525
Disposal of Used Coolant .................529
Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................525
Inspection ............................529
Points to Remember .....................529
Pressure Cap ..........................528
594 INDEX
Radiator Cap ..........................528
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............526
Corrosion Protection .......................537
Cruise Control (Speed Control)................194
Cupholders .............................268
Customer Assistance .......................583
Data Recorder, Event .......................84
Daytime Running Lights ....................173
Dealer Service............................508
Defroster, Rear Window.....................280
Defroster, Windshield ......................113
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................529
Door Locks ..............................32
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ......35
Door Locks ............................35
Door Locks, Automatic ......................34
Door Opener, Garage.......................244
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................402
Economy (Fuel) Mode ......................388
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........262
Electric Rear Window Defrost.................280
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................133
Electronic Brake Control System ...............409
Brake Assist System .....................410
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..............411
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........189
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............412
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)......294
Change Engine Oil ......................301
Change Engine Oil Indicator System ..........301
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .297
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu ...........................297
10
INDEX 595
EVIC Display ..........................300
EVIC Messages .........................297
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................495
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................476
Jump Starting ..........................490
Tow Hooks ............................497
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........507
Engine .................................505
Air Cleaner ...........................513
Break-In Recommendations ................110
Checking Oil Level ......................510
Compartment ..........................505
Coolant (Antifreeze) .....................525
Cooling ..............................524
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................50
Fails to Start ...........................384
Flooded, Starting .......................384
Fuel Requirements ......................450
Jump Starting ..........................490
Oil..................................510
Oil Change Interval ......................511
Oil Filler Cap ..........................512
Oil Selection ...........................511
Oil Synthetic ..........................512
Overheating ...........................476
Starting ..............................381
Temperature Gauge ......................290
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................512
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............80
Entry System, Illuminated ....................22
Ethanol ................................451
Event Data Recorder ........................84
Exhaust Gas Caution........................50
Exhaust System...........................111
Exterior Lights ...........................114
596 INDEX
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................513
Air Conditioning .......................375
Engine Oil ............................513
Engine Oil Disposal .....................513
Flashers ................................476
Hazard Warning ........................476
Turn Signal ............................114
Flooded Engine Starting ....................384
Fluid, Brake .............................561
Fluid Capacities ..........................559
Fluid Leaks .............................115
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ................................531
Cooling System .........................525
Engine Oil ............................510
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........560
Fog Lights ..............................289
Fog Light Service .........................554
Folding Rear Seat .........................161
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................476
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................495
Front Axle (Differential).....................532
Fuel...................................450
Adding ..............................455
Additives .............................453
Clean Air .............................451
Economy Mode ........................388
Ethanol ..............................451
Gasoline ..............................450
Gauge ...............................293
Materials Added ........................453
Methanol .............................451
Octane Rating ..........................450
Requirements ..........................450
Tank Capacity ..........................559
Fueling ................................455
10
INDEX 597
Fuses ..................................542
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ............244
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................451
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................450
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................451
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .....................290
Fuel .................................293
Speedometer ..........................289
Tachometer ............................288
Gear Ranges .............................391
General Information .......................217
Glass Cleaning ...........................541
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...................462
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................461
GVWR .................................459
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................402
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................476
Headlights ..............................553
Bulb Replacement .......................553
On With Wipers ........................171
Passing ..............................180
Replacing .............................553
Heated Mirrors ...........................134
High Beam Indicator .......................288
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................464
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) ............244
Hood Release ............................168
598 INDEX
Ignition
Key..................................14
Illuminated Entry ..........................22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................17
Infant Restraint ...........................85
Information Center, Vehicle ..................297
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................125
Instrument Cluster ........................288
Instrument Panel and Controls ................286
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............541
Interior Appearance Care....................540
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............182
Introduction ..............................4
Inverter, Power ...........................267
iPod® Control ...........................341
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control ...................341
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio ...............341
Jacking Instructions........................482
Jack Location ............................479
Jack Operation ...........................482
Jump Starting ............................490
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm .........................20
Panic Alarm ............................26
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........19
Programming Additional Transmitters .........19
Unlock Liftgate .........................46
Key-In Reminder ..........................16
Keyless Enter-N-Go ........................36
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ..................330
Passive Entry Programming .................36
Unlock Liftgate .........................46
10
INDEX 599
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ .....................36
Passive Entry ...........................36
Keyless Entry System .......................23
Keyless Go...............................14
Key, Replacement ..........................18
Keys ...................................14
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................17
Lane Change Assist........................180
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................54
Latches ................................115
Lead Free Gasoline ........................450
Leaks, Fluid .............................115
Life of Tires .............................438
Liftgate .................................46
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...............279
Light Bulbs..............................114
Lights .................................114
Airbag ................................77
Anti-Lock .............................288
Automatic Headlights ....................171
Back-Up ..............................555
Brake Assist Warning ....................416
Brake Warning .........................291
Bulb Replacement .......................552
Cargo ...............................274
Center Mounted Stop ....................558
Daytime Running .......................173
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................169
Exterior ..............................114
Fog .................................289
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................476
Headlights ............................553
Headlights On With Wipers ................171
High Beam Indicator .....................288
Illuminated Entry ........................22
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........289
600 INDEX
Map Reading ..........................177
Passing ..............................180
Reading ..............................177
Rear Servicing .........................555
Rear Tail .............................555
Seat Belt Reminder ......................288
Security Alarm .........................296
Service ...............................552
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .289
Side Marker ...........................555
SmartBeams ...........................172
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............293
Traction Control ........................416
Turn Signal ............................114
Vanity Mirror ..........................135
Loading Vehicle ..........................459
Tires ................................425
Locks ..................................32
Automatic Door .........................34
Child Protection .........................35
Door .................................32
Power Door ............................34
Lubrication, Body .........................518
Lug Nuts ...............................477
Maintenance Free Battery....................514
Maintenance Procedures ....................509
Maintenance Schedule ......................564
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......289
Manual, Service ..........................588
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...............163
Memory Seat ............................163
Memory Seats and Radio ....................163
Methanol ...............................451
Mirrors ................................125
Electric Powered ........................133
Electric Remote .........................133
Exterior Folding ........................132
10
INDEX 601
Heated ...............................134
Outside ..............................132
Rearview .............................125
Vanity ...............................135
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................442
Mopar Parts .............................508
MTBE/ETBE ............................451
Multi-Function Control Lever.................169
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................110
Occupant Restraints ........................50
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ..................72
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................450
Odometer...............................294
Trip.................................294
Oil, Engine ..............................510
Capacity .............................559
Change Interval ........................511
Checking .............................510
Disposal ..............................513
Filter ................................513
Filter Disposal .........................513
Identification Logo ......................512
Materials Added to ......................513
Recommendation .......................511
Synthetic .............................512
Viscosity .............................512
Oil Filter, Selection ........................513
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................506
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ............244
Operating Precautions ......................506
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............6
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................132
Overhead Console.........................242
Overheating, Engine .......................291
602 INDEX
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .............6
Paint Care ..............................537
Panic Alarm ..............................26
Parking Brake............................406
ParkSense® System, Rear....................221
Passing Light ............................180
Passive Entry .............................36
Pets ...................................109
Pets, Transporting .........................109
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........425
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) ................543
Door Locks ............................34
Inverter ..............................267
Lift Gate ..............................47
Mirrors ..............................133
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........262
Seats ................................146
Steering ..............................404
Sunroof ..............................254
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............187
Windows ..............................41
Power Steering Fluid.......................561
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................68
Preparation for Jacking .....................481
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................62
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Radial Ply Tires ..........................432
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........528
Radio Operation ..........................364
Radio Remote Controls .....................362
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................341
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................184
Rear Axle (Differential) .....................532
Rear Camera ............................239
10
INDEX 603
Rear Cross Path ..........................142
Rear Cupholder ..........................268
Rear ParkSense System .....................221
Rear Seat, Folding .........................161
Rear Window Features .....................279
Rear Wiper/Washer........................279
Reclining Front Seats.......................151
Recorder, Event Data .......................84
Recreational Towing .......................474
Reformulated Gasoline .....................451
Refrigerant ..............................517
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................67
Remote Control
Starting System .........................25
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..................23
Arm The Alarm .........................20
FCC General Information ..................28
Panic Alarm ............................26
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........19
Programming Additional Transmitters .........19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........362
Remote Starting
Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . .332
Uconnect® Settings ......................332
Remote Starting System......................25
Replacement Bulbs ........................551
Replacement Keys .........................18
Replacement Parts.........................508
Replacement Tires .........................439
Reporting Safety Defects ....................587
Restraints, Child...........................85
Restraints, Occupant ........................50
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ................276
Roll Over Warning ..........................5
Rotation, Tires ...........................441
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle..................112
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................114
604 INDEX
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................587
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................50
Safety Information, Tire .....................418
Safety Tips ..............................111
Schedule, Maintenance .....................564
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................541
Seat Belt Reminder .........................67
Seat Belts ................................54
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........59
And Pregnant Women .....................68
Child Restraint ..........................85
Extender ..............................68
Front Seat .............................54
Inspection ............................112
Pretensioners ...........................62
Reminder .............................288
Shoulder Belt Anchorage ...................59
Untwisting Procedure .....................59
Seats ..................................145
Adjustment ...........................150
Easy Entry ............................167
Memory ..............................163
Power ...............................148
Rear Folding ..........................161
Reclining .............................151
Security Alarm ............................20
Arm The System ........................20
Tamper Alert ...........................22
Security System ...........................20
Selection of Oil ...........................511
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information ..................19
Key Programming .......................19
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................17
Sentry Key Replacement .....................18
Service Assistance .........................583
Service Contract ..........................585
Service Manuals ..........................588
10
INDEX 605
Shifting ................................386
Automatic Transmission ..................386
Shoulder Belts ............................54
Side Airbag ..............................79
Signals, Turn.............................114
SmartBeams .............................172
Snow Tires ..............................433
Spare Tire...............................435
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................189
Speedometer.............................289
Starting .................................25
Automatic Transmission ..................381
Cold Weather ..........................384
Engine Fails to Start .....................384
Remote ...............................25
Starting and Operating .....................381
Starting Procedures ........................381
Steering
Power ...............................404
Tilt Column ...........................186
Wheel, Heated .........................188
Wheel, Tilt ............................186
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............362
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .362
Storage ................................271
Storage, Vehicle...........................374
Storing Your Vehicle .......................550
Sunglasses Storage ........................244
Sun Roof ...............................254
Sun Visor Extension .......................136
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..........69
Sway Control, Trailer.......................417
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................512
System, Remote Starting .....................25
Tachometer..............................288
Telescoping Steering Column .................186
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........373
606 INDEX
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ............290
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................277
Tilt Steering Column .......................186
Tire and Loading Information Placard...........425
Tire Markings ............................418
Tires ..................................114
Aging (Life of Tires) .....................438
Air Pressure ...........................429
Compact Spare .........................435
General Information .....................429
High Speed ...........................432
Inflation Pressures .......................430
Life of Tires ...........................438
Load Capacity .........................425
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............442
Pressure Warning Light ...................293
Quality Grading ........................589
Radial ...............................432
Replacement ...........................439
Rotation ..............................441
Safety ...............................418
Sizes ................................420
Snow Tires ............................433
Spare Tire .............................481
Spinning .............................437
Tread Wear Indicators ....................438
Tire Safety Information .....................418
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................467
Tow Hooks, Emergency .....................497
Towing ................................461
Behind a Motorhome .....................474
Guide ...............................465
Recreational ...........................474
Weight ...............................465
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome ...........474
Traction Control ..........................409
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..................417
Trailer Towing ...........................461
10
INDEX 607
Cooling System Tips .....................474
Hitches ..............................464
Minimum Requirements ..................468
Trailer and Tongue Weight .................467
Trailer Towing Guide.......................465
Trailer Weight............................465
Transfer Case ............................534
Fluid ................................561
Maintenance ...........................534
Transmission ............................389
Automatic ............................386
Fluid ................................561
Maintenance ...........................534
Shifting ..............................386
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .244
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........23
Tread Wear Indicators ......................438
Turn Signals .............................289
Uconnect®
Customer Programmable Features ...........332
Operation .............................341
Screen Activated Features ..................24
Uconnect® Settings .......................25
Uconnect® Settings.........................24
Customer Programmable Features ............35
Passive Entry Programming .................35
Uconnect® Settings .......................46
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................589
Universal Transmitter ......................244
Unleaded Gasoline ........................450
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................59
Vanity Mirrors ...........................135
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............8
Vehicle Loading ..........................426
608 INDEX
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............9
Vehicle Storage ...........................374
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................512
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................476
Warning, Roll Over .........................5
Warnings and Cautions.......................8
Warranty Information ......................586
Washers, Windshield .......................181
Washing Vehicle ..........................537
Water
Driving Through ........................402
Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................539
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................539
Wind Buffeting............................46
Window Fogging .........................375
Windows ................................41
Power ................................41
Wind Buffeting ..........................46
Windshield Defroster.......................113
Windshield Washers .......................181
Fluid ................................521
Windshield Wiper Blades....................519
Windshield Wipers ........................181
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................519
Wipers, Intermittent .......................182
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................184
10
INDEX 609
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drink-
ing, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea-
tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obliga-
tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drink-
ing, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of fea-
tures and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obliga-
tion upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This
connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only
fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure
a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This
connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only
fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure
a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
1283259cv1 14WK741-126-AA Grand Cherokee Chrysler 1" gutter 12/05/2012 15:56:03
Grand Cherokee
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Grand Cherokee
14WK741-126-AA Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014
Grand Cherokee
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Grand Cherokee
14WK741-126-AA Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014
Grand Cherokee
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Grand Cherokee
14WK741-126-AA Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014
Grand Cherokee
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Grand Cherokee
14WK741-126-AA Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014
Grand Cherokee
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Grand Cherokee
14WK741-126-AA Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014
Grand Cherokee
OWNER’S MANUAL
2014 Grand Cherokee
14WK741-126-AA Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2014
COVER INCOVER IN
Chrysler Group LLC
14WK742-126-AG
Seventh Edition
Printed in U.S.A.

Navigation menu